2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
500L
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing &
Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license
by Chrysler Group LLC.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers:
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
maintaining its validity
traditional to our vehicles.
• The range of additional services available to FIAT
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisGroup Automobiles customers
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
1
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front floor pan under the passenger seat, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .20
▫ Request For Additional Remote Controls . . . . . .20
▫ Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open . . .24
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) . . . . .24
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .44
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .82
Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Liftgate Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .31
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer.
key simply push the mechanical key release button.
Ignition Switch
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The ignition switch can be turned to three different
positions:
• STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical
devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system, etc.) can operate;
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions, the transmission must be in PARK before the key
can be removed.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• AVV: engine start-up;
• MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that
requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the
engine does not start, before the starting operation can be
repeated.
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the
key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
SENTRY KEY®
problem with the electronics.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauCAUTION!
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unator unlocked.
tended.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not comelectronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sysvehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are protems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
starting problems and loss of security protection.
the vehicle.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauSystem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an thorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
authorized dealer.
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following auThe Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
subject to the following conditions:
Security Light on the instrument panel will flash.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
To Arm The System
Replacement Keys
• This device must accept any interference that may be 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
received, including interference that may cause undeof the vehicle.
sired operation.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter time even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly
and close all doors.
closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the
system. Contact your authorized dealer.
3. The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will switch on for approxi- To Disarm The System
mately 3 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Push UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the ON/RUN position.
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when
After approximately 3 seconds, the Vehicle Security the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
Light will flash. This shows that the Vehicle Security cylinder.
Alarm is fully armed.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time. remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed,
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors, hood
when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will
and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
sound. If this occurs, push the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to
break-in attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device
each time you park your car.
Safe Lock Device Location
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Activating The Safe Lock Device
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
quickly double-pushing the LOCK button on the RKE
• By pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmittransmitter.
ter’;
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
• By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside the This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
passenger compartment by entering the car through, and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitthen closing, the open door.
ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key
Release Button
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls. Should
a new remote control be necessary, go to an authorized
dealer, taking an ID document and the car ownership
documents.
Key Fob Components
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
• push button A to open the metal insert B;
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• turn the screw C to Unlock using a small screwdriver; NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• take out the battery case D and replace the battery E
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
making sure that polarities are correct;
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it distance, check for these two conditions:
turning the screw C to Lock.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
the battery is a minimum of three years.
specified by law, see your authorized dealer for assis2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tance needed.
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
General Information
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Press the central LOCK/UNLOCK button located on the
instrument panel, in the switch bank below the radio.
The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors
are locked or unlocked.
• LED ON: doors locked. Pressing the central LOCK/
UNLOCK button once will unlock all doors. The LED
will switch off once the doors are unlocked.
• LED OFF: doors unlocked. Pressing the central
LOCK/UNLOCK button once will lock all doors. The
LED will switch on once the doors are locked.
Central LOCK/UNLOCK Button
Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmitter, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by
pressing central LOCK/UNLOCK button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: With central locking active (LED ON), opening
one of the front doors, it is possible to perform a central
unlocking (LED OFF). With central locking active (LED
ON), in order to open one of the rear passenger doors, it
is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice. With
one of the rear door open (LED OFF), the unlocking is
performed only for that door, not for all the vehicle.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must pull
the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the
door handle a second time to open the door.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the vehicle
OFF, apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into REVERSE, and remove the Key Fob from
the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible locking the vehicle through the RKE,
internal button or external key pawl, also if one or more
doors are open. At lock command request, LED is
switched ON. At closing of the last door, the vehicle
maintains the central locking status if key is not inserted
in Ignition Device, otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked
and the LED will be switched OFF.
NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch,
but is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize
the presence of the key and after the closing of last door,
the vehicle remains locked.
Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON), if
a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF), as
soon as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED
ON).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock
1. Open the rear door.
the doors using the central unlock button, roll down the
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate window and open the door using the exterior handle.
clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise
to UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door, which operate the front passenger window and a single switch on each rear door that operates
the rear passenger door window. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
A — Driver Front Window
Switch
B — Passenger Front Window
Switch
C — Window Lockout Switch
D — Driver Rear Window
Switch
E — Passenger Rear Window
Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled
to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch for approximately one second, release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
after the window is fully open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
(RKE) transmitter or activate the central locking button However, because the gas pressure drops with temperalocated on the instrument panel below the radio.
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic release opening the liftgate in cold weather.
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Liftgate Emergency Release is
built into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the
Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats
completely
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied
3. With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow color (A)
Yellow Tab Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
trigger the release tab of the trunk (follow the direction Some of the most important safety features in your
arrow to open)
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Release Tab
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween you and the door and you could be injured.
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
them or under their arm.
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
Seat Belt Systems
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver outboard front seat belts are buckled.
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
happen far away from home or on your own street.
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
Seat Belt Extender
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
shoulder belt.
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
anchor point.
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch pant, it must be removed.
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) —
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be If Equipped
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
Energy Management Feature
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the outboard front and rear
seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing
in a controlled manner.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
⬙click.⬙
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
Driver
Center
Passenger
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
Children 12 years old and under should always be
• N/A — Not Applicable
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and
Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
system components:
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
• Air Bag Warning Light
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air
bag covers.
• Instrument Panel
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air
sensors or other system components.
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the hanced protection during a frontal impact by working
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Front Air Bags.
Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and certain rollover events (if
equipped with rollover sensing), in addition to the injury
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
structure.
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing), in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover (if equipped with rollover
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front sensing) or side impact events.
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events (if equipped with rollover sensing). The Occupant
Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event (if equipped with rollover
sensing) is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. The rollover sensing system may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners with the SABs and SABICs on
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
both sides of the vehicle, if the vehicle experiences a
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
rollover event.
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during If A Deployment Occurs
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
Front Air Bags deploy.
immediately after deployment.
Rollover Events (If Equipped with Rollover Sensing)
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the air bag system.
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle or all of the following may occur:
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricThe rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE:
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inauthorized dealer immediately.
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Enhanced Accident Response System
System Reset Procedure
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message “Fuel Cutoff” is displayed. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
both be blinking and will continue to blink until the
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. In order to
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in follow the system reset procedure.
the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
8. Turn ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Will See
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
successful.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
with air bag system electrical components.
again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
not inflate.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructhe rear seats rather than in the front.
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, all.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback and
seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchors located behind
each rear seatback, near the floor.
2
Tether Anchorage Routing Position
Upper Tether Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autothe strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
Center Seat LATCH:
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes
Yes
No
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Yes, all may be removed
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.”
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .93 䡵 OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD . . . . . .110
▫ Conversation Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .94 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .113
▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
䡵 SEATS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .128
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .118
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .132
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .122
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .132
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .123 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .136
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .137
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .140 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .141 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped . .152
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES . . . . . . . .153
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Securing Your Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .145
▫ Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .161
▫ Power Sun Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the
overhead console.
Conversation Mirror
Conversation Mirror Location
To gain access to the conversation mirror, pull downward
on the mirror to the open position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
3
Power Mirror Controls
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Sun Visors
Sun Visor (Driver Side Shown)
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addirotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors. sun.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor SEATS
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
Front Seats
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Seat Height Adjustment
Adjusting Bar
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
3
Height Adjustment Lever
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
Recline Lever
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Press the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar
support. Release the switch when you reach the desired
position.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats within two to five minutes.
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
WARNING!
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the outer side of the seat.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated Seat Switch
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the floor.
the seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seats
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seat.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Release Lever
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Seatback Folded
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side
of the seat and lift upward on the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Seatback Recline Lever
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Folding Rear Seat
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the
seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback
into position.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Armrest — If equipped
To use the armrest, lower it downward.
Armrest Cupholder
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealership.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Adjustment Button
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealership immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints, the outboard head restraints have two comfort
positions, while the central head restraint have to use in
the raised position. When there are no occupants in the
centre seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver, when the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint has to be in the raised
position.
3
To raise the outboard head restraints, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraints, press the
push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
Push Buttons
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the
head restraints require removal, see you authorized
dealer.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before To open the hood, two latches must be released to open
Starting Your Vehicle”
the hood.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red
safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The
safety catch lever is located under the center front
edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Catch Lever
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up- Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off through the
touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement
Manual for further information.
High Beams
Headlight Operation
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunction lever towards the steering wheel to turn on
the high beams. Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to turn off the high beams.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steermoved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
Lane Change Assist
turn on until the lever is released.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
Parking Lights
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
turn on the headlights.
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Turn Signals
Activation
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Flash-To-Pass
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console,
press the switch to the on/right position from its center
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
position and the lights are always on.
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Deactivation
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
3
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
radio. Press the switch once to turn the front
fog lights on. Press the switch a second time to turn the
front fog lights off.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
On/Right Position
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch to the off/left position from its center Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are
position and the lights are always off.
turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.
Off/Left Position
Center Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and
press the switch to the left to turn on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10
second timer is activated.
Map/Reading Light Switches
• When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
activated.
raised or lowered to access these modes.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Windshield Wiper Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Speed
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
speed.
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
Low Speed
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
Front Windshield Washer Operation
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Front Windshield Washer Operation
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
3
• In intermittent mode when the front windshield wiper
is not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper) when the front windshield wiper is
operating.
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.
Rear Window Wiper Operation
With the front windshield wipers on and reverse gear Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
same way.
pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function, as described for the windscreen wiper.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located on the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — RES +
2 — ON/OFF
3 — CANCEL
4 — SET -
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inMetric Speed (km/h)
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underthe button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
vehicle set speed.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
the new set speed will be established.
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and
recommendations.
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indication of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Rear Park Assist Sensors
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist in (30 cm) away.
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL
Obstacle Distance
MEANING
An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
INDICATION
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that
increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information).
Visual signal (EVIC)
• Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist
Display” for further information).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
SIGNAL
Failure
MEANING
Sensor or System failures
INDICATION
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not instrument panel warning icon and message displayed
on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
muted.
display.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped).
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
(EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument
turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
Panel” for further information.
maneuvers parallel to walls).
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indiA malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
Failure Indications
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor Park Assist System Usage Precautions
is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the
NOTE:
Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference
to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
turned off automatically.
system operating properly.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va- • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
appears again.
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
performed only by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to your Uconnect®
Supplement Manual for further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sunvisor Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button. before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
transmitter button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actifrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Revate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can erase the channels.
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indiTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
cator light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
transmitter button.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button.
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time-out in the same manner.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
not release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
erase the channels.
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while programming, plug it back in at this time.
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmit- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
ter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully (Canadian/Gate Operator)
accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
follow these steps:
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
door may open and close while you are programming.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
follow all remaining steps.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Using HomeLink®
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position,
HomeLink® will remain active for three minutes. During
this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink® is disabled.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
Security
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with
an electrically operated sun blind.
3
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be
operated only with the ignition key turned to the ON/
RUN position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are
located in the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
2 — Power Sunroof Switch
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key
Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
To Open
• Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for
approximately one second and release, the sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”.
NOTE: During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
• With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and
hold the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second.
NOTE: During Express close any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing
stages, if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will stop the blind movement.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the POWER OUTLETS
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Passenger Compartment Power Socket
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with The power outlet is located on the central tunnel, in front
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows of the shift lever, between the two cup holders. It only
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs operates with the ignition key at MAR/ON.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
On models with optional ⬙smoker’s kit,⬙ the cigar lighter
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
takes the place of the power socket (see ⬙Cigar lighter⬙
Power Sun Blind
paragraph).
• Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will
move towards the rear part of the car, until it is fully
open.
Wind Buffeting
With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch
and the blind will move towards the front part of the car,
until it is fully closed.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the central tunnel, next to the parking
brake lever. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release
the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically
returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready
for use.
Passenger Compartment Power Socket
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
NOTE:
• Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
• Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W
to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- located in the center armrest.
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholder
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove
compartment which is located on the right side of the
instrument panel. Push the latch button upward on the
upper glove compartment door to open it. Pull outward
on the lower glove compartment latch to open the lower
glove compartment. Push the upper glove compartment
door down to close it and the lower glove compartment
door upward to close it.
3
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage compartment.
To open the storage compartment push in the upper
release latch on the front of the armrest.
Glove Compartment Storage
Armrest Upper Release Latch
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage
area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The front center armrest can also be lifted up and
adjusted in three positions, this is done by pulling up on
the armrest, push the latch down to adjust the armrest
down.
REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES
The car features a load platform which can be adjusted to
three different heights, permitting modular luggage compartment volume:
• Position 1 (platform completely lowered) permits
maximum luggage compartment capacity.
• Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits a level
load threshold to facilitate loading/unloading of objects
in the luggage compartment. It also allows the space
underneath to be used as a additional compartment for
stowing objects which are more fragile or small.
Front Center Armrest Raised Position
• Position 3 (platform completely raised) in conjunction
with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger
side seat backrests, permits long objects to be loaded. It
is advisable to use this position only for the actual
period in which the objects are transported, then
return the platform to position 1 or 2.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt of cargo floor
The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle (tilted
toward the rear seat backs), in order to facilitate access to
the area below the luggage compartment. In this position
also the plan guarantees the correct locking of any objects
present inside the cargo area, avoiding that they move in
the event of sudden braking.
Tilt Floor Feature
CAUTION!
The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maximum
capacity of a distributed weight of 154 lbs (70kg) (if
positioned at threshold level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
CAUTION! (Continued)
positioned at raised level) do not add objects with a
higher weight.
3
Access to double load compartment
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it with one
hand.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the desired objects in compartment.
Platform Housings
Load Compartment
1 — Front Locations
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in the housings 2 — Rear Locations
on the side panels and rear crossmember.
NOTE: Movements of the load platform must take place
in a central position relative to the luggage compartment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Moving the load platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding it with
one hand.
3
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Position the platform correctly on housing on the side Securing Your Load
panels.
There are two tie downs inside the luggage compartment
for attaching cables which can secure the load carried.
A further two tie downs located on the rear crossmember.
Raised Position
1 — Front Housing Locations
2 — Rear Housing Locations
Cargo Tie Down Locations
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix
loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags). To use
the hooks, press the release button.
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is
22 lbs (10 kg).
3
Cargo Side Panel Hook Locations
1 — Release Button
2 — Hook
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Compartments
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
There are two storage compartments located on the rear Rear Window Defroster
side panels.
The rear window defroster button is located with
the climate controls on the instrument panel. Press
this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs
that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .167
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ EVIC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL . . . . .187
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .188
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .180
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .190
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Manual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Navigation (6.5A/6.5AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Side Vent
2 — Steering Wheel Audio Control — Located On Back Side Of Steering Wheel
3 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control
4 — Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights
5 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer
6 — Central Air Vents
7 — Fixed Upper Air Vent
8 — Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
13 — Climate Controls
14 — USB Port/SD Card/AUX Socket
9 — Upper Glove Compartment
10 — Storage Compartment
11 — Lower Glove Compartment
12 — Upper Switch Bank
15 — Uconnect® Audio System
16 — Ignition Switch
17 — Driver Advanced Front Air Bag / Horn
18 — Electronic Speed Control Located On
Steering Wheel
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Malfunction Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is
2. Cruise SET Indicator — If Equipped
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on conThis light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information, tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on,
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
standing Your Instrument Panel.”
problem diagnosed and corrected.
3. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indicator
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
Light
flash as soon as the ESC system or TCS system become
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- active.
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces• The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/ sary.
Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily
WARNING!
each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
5. Brake Warning Light
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the Brake Warning Light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
there is a problem with the brake system res- turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position
ervoir.
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is 8. Fuel Gauge
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
inspected by an authorized dealer.
digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is fuel tank.
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiNOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately
tion.
update accurately when refueling with the engine on.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
9. Turn Signal Indicators
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
The arrows will flash in unison with the exte6. Rear Defrost Light
rior turn signal, when using the turn signal
This indicator will illuminate when the rear winlever.
dow defroster is on. The rear window defroster
10. Temperature Gauge
automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem7. Low Fuel Light
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gallon that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
(7.6L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaadded.
ture when driving in hot weather, or up mountain
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the
temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The
engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
12. High Beam Indicator
14. Tachometer
This light indicates that the headlights are on high The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
prevent engine damage.
13. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home
(Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped
15. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow
Me Home feature is activated this indicator
will illuminate and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will show how long the function
remains active. For further information, refer to “Follow
Me Home” in “Understanding The Features of Your
Vehicle”.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Air Bag Warning Light
18. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light will turn on for four seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
17. Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator 19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Light should come on and remain on for at
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
least four seconds as a bulb check when the
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that
ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN
monitors engine and Euro Twin Clutch Transmisposition. If the Passenger Air Bag Disable Warning Light sion control systems. The light will illuminate when the
is flashing, contact your authorized dealer as soon as key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
possible for inspection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
bulb does not come on when turning the key from
OFF/LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
20. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
21. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the
ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug
light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10
seconds.
If equipped with a block heater harness the message
⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F
(-15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to
avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.
22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and
“Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).”
23. Fuel Door Location Reminder
The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door
is located on the right side of the vehicle.
24. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
during starting, have the system checked by an autho- (EVIC)
rized dealer.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
instrument cluster.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition The EVIC consists of the following:
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
• System Status
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate • Outside Temperature Display
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
• Trip Computer Functions
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced EVIC Screen
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the The EVIC will display the following:
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have • Time
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers
• Outside temperature
• Gear Indicator
Push and release the UP
button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options
or to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the DOWN
button to scroll down• Odometer (display of distance travelled in miles/ ward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to decrease the value displayed.
kilometers)
and DOWN
buttons activate differ• Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice on NOTE: UP
ent functions according to the following situations:
road, service, etc.)
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
EVIC Control Buttons
The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument • To increase or decrease values during settings.
panel below the radio.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the display will turn on the clock, the external temperature
menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/
menu option. Push and hold the MENU button (approxi- markets, where provided) for a few seconds.
mately one second) to return to the main screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
• Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
cycle. The menu includes the following functions:
main menu option to set.
• Dimmer
• Speed Buzzer
• First Page
• Buzzer Volume
• Belt Buzzer
• Hill Start
• Exit Menu
or DOWN
Push and release the UP
single pushes) to select the new setting.
button (by
Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
• Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the
first submenu option.
or DOWN
button (by
Push and release the UP
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the Change Engine Oil Indicator System
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
setup menu.
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
or DOWN
button (by flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
Push and release the UP
single pushes) to select the new setting for this sub- after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
menu option.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
new setting and go back to the previously selected
upon your personal driving style.
submenu option.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Push and release and hold the MENU button to return to time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
hold).
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed and travel time).
Trip Button
• A short button push displays the different values.
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column • A long button push resets the system and then starts a
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
new trip.
described values.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
New Trip
Start Of Trip Procedure
To reset:
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system over one second to reset.
manually.
Exit Trip
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto- one second.
matically.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxisystem.
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of storing settings.
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor- Trip Functions
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
reset.
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
• Trip distance A
Values Displayed
• Average Economy A
Range
• Instant Economy
• Travel time A (driving time).
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• Trip distance B
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
• Average speed A
• Average Economy B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time).
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance Traveled
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. Features)
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert®
Average Economy
Indication)
This value shows the approximate average consumption
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
since the last reset.
Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the BeltAlert®
Instant Economy
system. Refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- System BeltAlert®” in “Occupant Restraints” for further
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the information.
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
To reactivate this function, proceed as follows:
or DOWN
button
• Push and release the UP
briefly;
⬙Off⬙
will
flash
on
the
display.
Push
and
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcor
DOWN
button
and
⬙On⬙
release
the
or
UP
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
will appear;
Travel Time
• Push and release the SET ESC button briefly to return
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
to the submenu screen or hold the button down to
return to the main menu screen without saving.
Average Speed
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany- (mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to immediately alerted.
one of eight volume levels.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The dis1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The preplay will show the message (Speed Beep).
viously set volume “level” will flash on the display.
or DOWN
button to
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN
button for
select speed limit activation (On) or deactivation
2. Push and release the UP
setting.
(Off).
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
release the MENU button to display the presently set
or DOWN
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
activation speed. Pushing the UP
buttons selects the speed limit. Push MENU to
main screen without storing the settings.
confirm selection.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 – 125 mph or (32 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
– 201 km/h), depending on the selected unit. The setting
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
will increase/decrease by five units each time the UP/
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
DOWN button is pushed. Push and hold the UP/DOWN
main screen without storing the settings.
button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the
Dimmer
setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach
NOTE: The brightness of IPC will change automatically
the required setting.
only if the External light has changed: External light On=
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
Night Mode, External Light OFF= Day Mode. In both
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
case (Day or Night) is possible to adjust the display
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
brightness as described in step 1 below.
main screen without storing the settings.
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
or DOWN
button to
1. Push and release the UP
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will
set the required brightness level.
flash on the display.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
button. “Off” will
2. Push and release the DOWN
to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU
flash on the display.
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Hill Start Assist
Exit Menu
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the main screen.
button to return to the first
Push and release the
menu option (Speed Beep).
Push and release the
button to return to the last
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
menu option (Daylights).
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
Uconnect® RADIOS
or DOWN
button for For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
2. Push and release the UP
setting.
refer to your Uconnect® supplement Manual.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port.
screen without storing the settings.
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear
of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access
the switches.
USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Connector
2 — AUX/Cable Jack
Refer to the Uconnect® 5.0/6.5 User’s Manual for iPod®
and external USB support capability.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset button.
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
Player Operation
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of the switch
control is different depending on which mode you are in. once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to
the beginning of the previous track if it is within one
The following describes the left-hand control operation in second after the current track begins to play.
each mode.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
CLIMATE CONTROLS
1. Temperature Control
Manual Climate Control System
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
Controls
2. Recirculation Control
Push this control button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials, an inner push knob and two push buttons.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
4. A/C Button
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
engaged.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp MAX A/C
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Semodes at the same time.
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
ECONOMY MODE
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
Defrost.
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dismove the temperature control to the desired temperature.
turbing the mode control selection.
5. Rear Defrost Control
3. Blower Control
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
speed increases as you move the control to the right from the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
6. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demister outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
• Floor
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a only when necessary.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Window Defrosting
Air Recirculation
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn Push and release the Air Recirculation button, so that the
the function on/off.
LED on the button switch is on, to enter recirculation
mode. It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation
The activation of the function is indicated by the rear
on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the
defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching
introduction of polluted air.
on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20
minutes.
Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if
there are many passengers on board, to prevent the
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate
windows from misting up.
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
reach the required heating or cooling conditions more
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the
that might cause them to stop working properly.
internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Air Distribution Selection
Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of
the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger
compartment:
Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passenger’s body).
Air flow to windshield and side windows.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
Air flow to the front windshield, front side win- distribution activates the climate control system comdow and front/rear footwell diffusers.
pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation
is set to ⬙outside air⬙ (LED on Recirculation Control
button off ). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This the windows. The user can always set air recirculation
air distribution allows the passenger compart- and climate control system compressor.
ment to be heated quickly.
Air flow distributed between central and side
dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Electric Heater (If Equipped)
System Maintenance
The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen- In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
ger compartment heating.
least once a month for about 10 minutes.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following Have the system inspected at a Fiat dealership before the
conditions are verified:
summer.
• outside temperature low;
• engine coolant temperature low;
• engine on;
• fan speed set to 1st speed;
• Temperature Control knob turned completely clockwise to red section.
The heater is switched off when at least one of the
conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does not
pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a allowed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System (If
Equipped)
Controls
1. Driver Temperature Control
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
2. Recirculation Control
Push and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will
flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not
proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation
indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode.
If the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation
setting is manual and Recirculation is ON.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Rear Defrost Control
6. Blower Control
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower
Control adjustment knob.
4. A/C Control
7. Blower Control Indicator LEDs
Push and release the A/C Control Button to change the
current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is
ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C
operation to switch into AUTO mode and the A/C
indicator will turn OFF.
LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed.
5. ON/OFF Control
8. Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets.
9. Front Defrost Control
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Push and release the Front Defrost Control button to
ON/OFF.
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. The blower speed may increase when
Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor
is switched ON (LED on button ON) and the air recirculation is switched OFF (LED on button OFF). If the front
defrost mode is turned OFF, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
10. Passenger Temperature Control
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
12. AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Description
control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperaThe automatic dual zone climate control system regulates
ture.
the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control two zones: driver side and passenger side.
knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com11. SYNC Button
partment and compensates for possible variations in
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. external climate conditions.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The climate control system can recognize extremely cold Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the
(or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart- system will only override the settings for safety reasons.
ment and consequently provide optimal management of
Manual selections always take priority over automatic
the system’s capabilities.
ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or
NOTE: The reference temperature is 72° F (22° C) for the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons.
optimal comfort management.
The amount of air introduced into the passenger comThe automatically controlled parameters and functions are: partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by
• air temperature at the driver/front passenger side the fan, which is controlled electronically.
vents;
The air temperature is always automatically controlled
according to the temperature set on the display (except
• fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow);
for when the system is off or in certain conditions when
• compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying the compressor is not running).
the air);
The system allows the following to be set or adjusted
• air recirculation.
manually:
All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat- • driver/passenger side air temperature;
ing the system, selecting one or more functions and
• fan speed (continuous variation);
modifying their parameters.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
• air distribution to seven positions;
Switching On The Climate Control System
• compressor enablement;
The climate control system can be switched on in different ways: it is advisable to push the AUTO button and
turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures.
• rapid defrosting/demisting function;
• air recirculation;
In this way the system operates completely automatically
to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of
the air introduced into the passenger compartment. It
• system deactivation.
also manages the air recirculation function and the actiNOTE: The climate control system detects the passenger vation of the air conditioning compressor.
compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem- During automatic operation, you can change the set
perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any time
and protected by a specific cover. Obstructing the field of by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will
view of this sensor with any object could cause the automatically change the settings to adjust to the new
climate control system to operate with less than optimal requirements.
efficiency.
• heated rear window;
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
During completely automatic operation (AUTO), varying
the air flow and/or distribution (which are not displayed) causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and
the system to operate in MANUAL mode (displaying
both the flow and distribution requested).
When the compressor is deactivated, the AUTO operation remains active only if the system can guarantee
in-car comfort. Otherwise, the system switches to
MANUAL mode (the set temperatures will flash on the
display). The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the
passenger compartment.
Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature
between the two zones.
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return
to the separate management of air temperatures in the
two zones.
Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or
the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heating) or ⬙LO⬙
(maximum cooling) functions respectively.
To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob
to the desired temperature.
Adjusting The Air Temperature
Air Distribution Selection
Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger
Temperature Control, dial clockwise or anti clockwise, to
adjust the air temperature in the front left (Driver Temperature Control) or right (Passenger Temperature Control) zone of the passenger compartment.
By pushing the Mode Control buttons (Up/Down/Right
arrows), it is possible to set one of the seven possible air
distributions manually:
The set temperatures are shown on the displays.
• Up Arrow – Air flow to the windshield and front side
window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
with maximum temperature settings for best wind- • Up/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between
shield and side window defrosting. When the defrost
footwell diffusers and windshield and front side window defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting almode is selected, the blower will automatically default
lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effecto medium-high.
tively and prevents the windows from misting.
• Right Arrow – Air flow at central and side dashboard
vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot • Up/Right Arrows – Air flow distribution between
windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central
season.
dashboard vents. This allows air to be sent to the
• Down Arrow – Air flow to the front and rear footwell
windshield in conditions of strong sunlight.
diffusers. This air distribution setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sen- • Up/Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distribution to all
sation of warmth.
diffusers on the car.
• Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between
footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side
dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution setting
is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.
NOTE: Air always flows from the side dashboard diffusers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow by
operating the wheel located near the corresponding
vents.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically AUTO Button
manages air distribution (the LEDs on the Mode Control When the AUTO button is pushed (LED on button lit) the
buttons are off ).
climate control system automatically adjusts the followWhen set manually, the air distribution is indicated by ing settings in the corresponding zones:
the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on.
• quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the
passenger compartment
In combined function mode, functions are enabled together with those already set when the relevant button is • climate control system compressor and
pushed. If a button whose function is already active is
pushed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding • air recirculation.
LED switches off.
Cancelling all previous manual adjustments.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button
manual selection, push the AUTO button.
switching on.
If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on,
the system switches to completely manual mode; it
displays the current flow and distribution status, which
will no longer be managed automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
If a manual intervention is made on at least the air Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the
distribution, on compressor button or on the fan speed, passenger side temperature and return to separate air
the LED switches off to indicate that the system is no temperature management.
longer controlling all functions automatically.
Air Recirculation
NOTE: Should the system no longer be able to guarantee The Air Recirculation is managed according to the folthe required temperature set in various passenger com- lowing operating logics:
partment zones, the set temperature value will flash for a
• forced activation (air recirculation always on): indifew seconds on the display.
cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button;
To restore automatic system control after one or more
• forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air
manual adjustments, push the AUTO button.
intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the
SYNC Button
Recirculation Control button switching off.
Push the SYNC button (LED on button lit) to align the
Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by pushpassenger side air temperature with that of the driver
ing the Recirculation Control button.
side.
When the On/Off button is pushed, the climate control
This function makes temperature regulation easier when
system automatically activates internal air recirculation
the driver is travelling alone.
(LED on Recirculation Control button on).
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto- Climate Control System Compressor
matically by the system according to outside environ- Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
mental conditions.
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button switching on).
NOTE:
• The engagement of the recirculation system makes it
possible to reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting up inside (especially if the climate control system is off ). When the
outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off
(air drawn in from the outside) to prevent the windows from misting up.
• It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when
the outside temperature is low, since the windows
could mist up rapidly.
The system remembers that the compressor has been
switched off, even after the engine has stopped.
When the compressor is switched off, the system deactivates air recirculation to prevent the windows from
misting up.
Pushing the A/C button will stop the AUTO MODE (the
AUTO LED will switch off). To restore automatic control
of compressor engagement, push the AUTO button
again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced • directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers;
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Moreover, under certain
• activates the heated rear window;
environmental conditions, windows could mist rapidly
• activates the heated windshield (if equipped);
since the air is not dehumidified.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-DEF function)
• displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED
lit).
Push the MAX-DEF button to activate (LED on button
on) the windshield and side window demisting function. NOTE: The Front Defrost Control (MAX-DEF) function
remains on for about three minutes from when the engine
The climate control system carries out the following
coolant reaches the appropriate temperature.
operations:
When the function is activated, the LED on the AUTO
• switches on the air conditioning compressor when
button switches off. With the function activated the only
environmental conditions are suitable;
possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed
• switches air recirculation off;
and turning the heated rear window off.
• sets fan speed according to the engine coolant tem- When the Recirculation Control, Rear Defrost Control , or
perature;
AUTO buttons are pushed, the climate control system
will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield dis- If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate
tribution activates the climate control system compressor defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
(LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation is set to
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
⬙outside air⬙ intake (LED on the recirculation button off ).
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. that might cause them to stop working properly.
It is, however, always possible to manage air recirculation
Switching Off The Climate Control System
and the climate control system compressor manually.
Push the On/Off button.
Rear Window Defrosting
With climate control system off:
Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear
window defrosting.
• air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger
compartment from the outside;
The effective activation of the function is indicated by the
rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel • the compressor is off;
switching ON.
• the fan is off;
This function switches OFF automatically after about 20
• the heated rear window can be activated / deactiminutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not
vated.
switched on automatically the next time the engine is
started.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
NOTE: The climate control system control unit stores the Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
temperatures set before the system was switched off and
Introducing Uconnect®
restores them when any button of the system is pushed
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
(except for the A/C Control button).
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
To restart the climate control system in fully automatic and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
mode push the AUTO button.
or 6.5A/6.5AN system.
Additional Heater (If Equipped)
This allows the passenger compartment to be heated
more quickly in cold weather conditions.
The heater switches off automatically when the required
comfort conditions are achieved.
The additional heater activates automatically depending
on the environmental conditions and with engine started.
NOTE: The heater only operates if the outside temperature and engine coolant temperature are low. The heater
will not activate if the battery voltage is too low.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0N
Key Features:
Uconnect® 6.5AN
Key Features:
• Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/ • 6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/Bluetooth®
USB/SD Card/Bluetooth®
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
Uconnect® Voice Command
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Rethe beep, then say your Voice Command.
ceive A Text
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 2 — Push to MUTE
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice 3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Media or Climate functions
Command from current category.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Radio
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Phone
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (6.5A/6.5AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 6.5AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
.
Uconnect® 6.5A/6.5AN Navigation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply”
the Phone button
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
system prompts.
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be Late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks
are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call
DriveUconnect.com
1-877-855-8400
or
visit
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .224 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .224
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .231
▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission —
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21-250
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
HD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .227
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
5
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .262
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .257
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .257
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .265
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .278
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .281
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo . . . . . . . .299
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .290 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .292 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .306
5
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
WARNING!
pedal is pressed to the floor.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK.
in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting
operate power windows, other controls, or move
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the vehicle.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE: Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil
and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is
important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
Cold Weather Operation
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
powered electric engine block heater is available as a
when the engine starts.
factory installed option.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
Extended Park Starting procedure.
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
5
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with a Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
5
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Shift Pattern (Six-Speed)
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
can result from starting in third.
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only Downshifting
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
prolong engine life.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
CAUTION!
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
clutch.
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below the cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE (R) selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
position.
the clutch and the transmission can result from
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
complete stop.
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis- down to second or first when descending a steep grade.
sion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade, NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur- shifting out of PARK.
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- Equipped
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK The transmission gear position display (located in the
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re- You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmis- to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this
section). To drive, press the lock button on the front of the
sion is locked in PARK.
shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
ON/RUN position (engine running or not), and the
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
brake pedal (and the lock button on the shift lever) must
hundred miles (kilometers).
be pressed.
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the Autostick® (-/+)
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates
Autostick® mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as
1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
Transmission Shift Lever
rearward (+) while in the Autostick® position will manuThis transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
ally select the transmission gear.
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiallow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
5
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
To maximize fuel economy, the Euro Twin Clutch Six
Speed Transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar
to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become
familiar with some of the normal operational characteristics of this transmission:
• During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
5
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
• At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar • When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to
the transmission.
“AutoStick” in this section for further information) to
• Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
lower gear will improve performance and extend
warning message will display in the Instrument Clustransmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
ter if cool down actions are needed.
heat buildup.
• When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to
• During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22° F (-30° C)
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
or below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
transmission in PARK in order to warm the fluid.
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
• Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE
GEAR UNAVAILABLE
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED
DESCRIPTION
In AutoStick mode, the gear selected by the driver is not
available due to a fault condition. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The gear position requested by the driver is currently
blocked. This occurs if REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or
faster). Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging
DRIVE or REVERSE.
5
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – THEN DRIVE OR REVERSE
AUTOMATIC UNAVAILABLE
REDUCE GEAR CHANGES
DESCRIPTION
The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a
fault condition, or overheat due to excessive idling when
stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released), but the shift
lever remains in gear. Shift into NEUTRAL and then back
into gear for continued driving. If the transmission will not
re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically,
due to a fault condition. Use the AutoStick mode to shift
the transmission manually. See your authorized dealer for
diagnosis and service.
The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick
mode, try to drive in one specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE, the
transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule
to reduce the number of shifts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
MESSAGE
TRANSMISSION GETTING HOT PRESS BRAKE
TRANS. HOT STOP SAFELY SHIFT TO PARK
WAIT TO COOL
TRANSMISSION COOL READY TO DRIVE
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SERVICE
SET PARK BRAKE
DESCRIPTION
The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due
to repeated launches in stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and
allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until “TRANS.
COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over,
shift the transmission into PARK, and allow the vehicle to
cool until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
The transmission has cooled down and the vehicle is OK
to drive.
A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly. Engage the parking brake to ensure that
the vehicle will not roll when in PARK.
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps:
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21-250
HD) — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on
the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer
to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this
section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
5
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Transmission Shift Lever
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
hundred miles (kilometers).
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).
Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode,
providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc).
Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the Autostick position will manually select the transmission gear.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick
in this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
ing.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may 1. Stop the vehicle.
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
service is required.
cluster.
AUTOSTICK
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
providing manual shift control, giving you more control rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing, • The transmission will automatically downshift as the
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
and many other situations.
display the current gear.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• With six-speed automatic (Aisin F21-250 HD) transmission, you can start out (from a stop) in first, second,
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
or third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can position at any time without taking your foot off the
be helpful in snow or icy conditions. To select second accelerator pedal.
or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap
the shift lever rearward (+) once or twice.
WARNING!
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
Acceleration
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipAutoStick is engaged.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
fault or overheat condition is detected.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the the front (driving) wheels.
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON and
the engine started. The steering allows the force required
at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving
conditions.
NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
steering functionality can be achieved after a few seconds.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual 1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
slightly, press the side button with your thumb, then
lower the lever completely.
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions and
are commonly referred to as ESC.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
Warning Light.”
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conIn the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unvehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informafacing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill tion.
is in REVERSE gear).
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety
level of the whole car.
In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip conditions), through the DST
function the ESC system controls the steering to implement an additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct manoeuvre to the
driver.
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the the safety and car control feeling.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the car.
5
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE:
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
off.
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
5
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• read Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuthose of the original wheels.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Replacement Tires
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, use reduced
size snow chains or traction devices with a maximum
projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20°
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
natural pressure loss through the tire.
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire presPressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
sure value.
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stopping ability.
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainteModule.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure.
Light.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module.
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
the tire.
Base System
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiinstrument cluster.
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 following conditions:
seconds and then remain on solid.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opTelltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
eration.
then remain on solid.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
following licenses:
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single)
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure Canada
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 87.
For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of
91 octane or higher is recommended.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to fuel system components.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyrequired.
genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these are required in some areas of the country during the
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap- winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
ing service for the vehicle.
your vehicle.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT In Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open the flapper
door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
5
Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Funnel Location For vehicle With Optional Spare Tire
Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Manual
Transmission
Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission
Flat Tow
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
On Trailer
Automatic
Transmission
(Aisin F21-250 HD
Transmission )
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
details.
the front wheels OFF the ground).
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, or a Euro 4. Release the brake pedal only when the parking brake
Twin Clutch transmission, may be flat towed (with all
is applied, or the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed,
vehicle.
for any distance, if the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
To place the Euro Twin Clutch transmission in NEUTRAL, follow the procedure below:
1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position. The key will remain
in the ignition switch (it cannot be removed, since the
transmission is not in PARK). Leave the key in the OFF
position while being towed.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .311 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .315 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
6
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE . . . . . . .342
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .340 䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . .341
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
(Continued)
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
17 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear trunk area on
the left side.
6
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the Tire • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
(6) when selecting this mode.
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
6
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomflowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
6
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3).
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
service center.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posand loading information label on the driver-side door
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceopening.
ment”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the DeflaNOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authotion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomrized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
using the Tire Service Kit.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
6
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area
underneath the cargo floor.
6
Jack Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Jack
Jack Handle
Emergency Allen key
Emergency Spare Tire Bag
Emergency Screwdriver
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to
lower the spare tire.
3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools.
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area
on the outside of the car.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch.
Winch Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
Preparations For Jacking
5. Turn Off the ignition.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
6
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an Euro Twin
Clutch Transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
6
Front Jacking Location
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating
notches on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Rear Jacking Location
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each 6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
side of the body (as indicated by the traingular lift point
7. Mount the spare tire.
symbols on the sill molding).
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
handle counterclockwise.
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
use, and operation.
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug
wheel bolts.
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
6
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
have them checked with a torque wrench by your Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire Bag and
stow the flat tire into the trunk.
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
Spare Tire Stowage
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
clockwise (the flat tire must not be connected to the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
winch) until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
heard indicating the winch is properly stowed.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side
of the engine compartment.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
Positive Terminal
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull upward on
the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Follow these steps to disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Pull outward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal
release lever to the open position.
2. Lift up on the negative (-) battery cable terminal and
set aside.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
NOTE: Before connecting the jumper cables to the dis3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
charged battery, the negative (-) battery cable must be
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
disconnected from the discharged battery. This is the only
way to successfully jump start the vehicle.
6
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
cable to the negative (-) battery cable terminal of the
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
discharged vehicle.
negative (-) battery cable terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then NOTE: The negative (-) battery cable must be connected
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged to the negative (-) post of the battery.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
Follow these steps to connect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to the negative (-) post of the battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
2. Push inward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
release lever to the closed position.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
spected at your authorized dealer.
and REVERSE (with Automatic or Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual
CAUTION!
transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if wheels, or racing the engine.
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
(Continued)
6
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the shift
lever override access hole (at the right rear corner of
the shift lever assembly) and push and hold the
override release lever down.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shift lever bezel and boot assembly from the center
console.
6
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
Shift Lever Override
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
Manual Transmission
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery
is discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interin order to move the vehicle.
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
CAUTION!
OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a proceed as follows:
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require 1. Firmly apply the parking brake
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the 2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
ground.
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the
cargo box.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
6
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to
have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would
like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure
special attention must be paid to the correct coupling
of the clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise
might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the
lower cover.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in the
rear cargo area inside the tool bag (if equipped), or on the
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
left side in the cargo box. If your vehicle is out of fuel and
cover.
an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the
filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
Release Tab Location
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .347
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .348
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .373
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
7
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission — Aisin F21-250 HD
Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .396
▫ Rear Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
7
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Battery
5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Oil Fill Cap
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and Euro Twin
Clutch Transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
CAUTION! (Continued)
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for turbocharged engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- Grade)
tion.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recomNOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
months, whichever occurs first.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
7
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Engine Oil Filter
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
tion.
at every engine oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product.
7
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
service be performed by authorized dealer using recov4. Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter
ery and recycling equipment.
access door to the HVAC housing.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
A/C Air Filter Access Door
5. Open the air filter access door.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
7
A/C Air Filter Access Door Open
A/C Air Filter Removal
6. Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air 7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
the housing.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
maintenance intervals.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods The enabling condition for Service Position Strategy is to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use have wiper in park position before turning OFF the Key.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
The functionality can be activated only within 2 minutes
from a dry windshield or rear window.
from turning OFF the Key.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
half a second.
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. At every valid activation of Service Position command,
the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- The Service Position command can be repeated several
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, times to bring the brushes into the desired position, up to
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are a maximum of 3 times.
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
After 3 subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Service Position Strategy
The service position shall allow user to change wiper
blade and to protect the wiper blade in snow condition
immediately after turning off the Key.
7
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Function deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• Turning ON the key.
• Number of subsequent activations is 3.
• 2 minutes timer has expired after turning OFF the key.
NOTE: If when turning ON the key the blades are not in
the parking position, the blades go into the parking
position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
blade off of the windshield.
3 — Wiper Arm
2. Press the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly press the wiper
3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it.
blade until it snaps into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
Exhaust System
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
Coolant Checks
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
MS.90032).
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
7
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that altrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
Adding Coolant
7
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
engine cooling system.
possible.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- Cooling System Pressure Cap
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
the vehicle is operated.
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
NOTE:
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
method for determining that the coolant level
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
visual
is adof the
be be-
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
with your local authorities to determine the disposal maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
7
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum compoized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
nents.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
condenser clean.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
maintenance intervals.
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Brake System
WARNING!
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
Brake Master Cylinder
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
when performing under hood services, or immediately if your local authorized dealer for service.
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
7
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.
7
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be Transmission fluid is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addichanged immediately.
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If Equipped
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
CAUTION!
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this the chemicals can damage your transmission composection for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the Vehicle Limited Warranty.
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should Fluid Level Check
be used.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Special Additives
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
any special additives in the transmission.
check your transmission fluid level using special service
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
Maintenance Schedule. In addition, change the fluid if it
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Automatic Transmission — Aisin F21-250 HD
Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
Fluid Changes
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
be used.
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the fluid as indicated in the
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
check your transmission fluid level using special service
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfuncmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addition, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vepolicy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
transmission damage.
adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If the engine compartment is washed with an high
pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches
(20 centimeters) from filler surface.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Special Care
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
a month.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
open.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detera fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
protectants on Stain Repel products.
required to maintain the original condition.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To directly on the mirror.
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folInstrument Panel Cover
lowed by rinsing.
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
protectants or other products which may cause undesirGlass Surfaces
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis low glare surface.
Cleaning Headlights
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
7
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
The ID number of the electrical component correspondThe Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
Underhood Fuses
7
Front Distribution Unit
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
F17
Maxi Fuse
60 Amp Blue
60 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Orange
70 Amp Tan
30 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
Description
Body Controller
Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
Ignition Switch
Anti-Lock Brake Pump
Electric Power Steering
Radiator Fan - Low Speed
Radiator Fan - High Speed
Blower Motor
Transmission
Horn
Powertrain
Power Outlet 115V
Transmission
Transmission Powertrain
Powertrain
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Cavity
F18
F19
F20
F21
F23
F24
F30
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F88
Maxi Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
70 Amp Tan
40 Amp Orange
40 Amp Orange
–
Mini Fuse
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Rear Defroster
Fuel Pump
Anti-Lock Brake Valves
Stability Control System
After Run Pump
PTC (Secondary)
Transmission
PTC (Primary)
Transmission
Front Power Outlet 12V
Rear Power Outlet 12V
Heated Mirrors
7
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
Rear Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under in the rear compartment.
the instrument panel.
Rear Fuse Panel
Interior Fuse Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Overhead Lamp
Sun Visors
Courtesy Lamp
Glove Compartment
Rear Courtesy Lamp
Bulb Number
C5W
C5W
W5W
C5W
C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Front
Front
Front
Front
Low and High Beam Headlamp
Turn Signal Lamps
Parking/Daytime Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
WY21W
W21/5W
LED (See Authorized dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps
Rear Tail Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear Side Marker Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped
License Plate Lamps
Bulb Number
P21/5W
LED (See Authorized dealer)
P21W
W16W
LED (See Authorized dealer)
LED (See Authorized dealer)
H11
W16W
W5W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the
headlamp housing by turning it counter-clockwise .
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
Bulb Removal Procedure
Electrical Connector Removal
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with 5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in
the openings in the metal holder.
place.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
New Bulb Installation
6. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
4. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
wheel liner.
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
housing.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
5. Reinstall lamp.
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Open the liftgate.
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to the
body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to
the tail lamp housing.
6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing.
7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula).
U.S.
13.1 Gallons
Metric
50 Liters
4 Quarts
3.8 Liters
6.1 Quarts
5.8 Liters
7
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-90032.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified
Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – Aisin F21-250 HD Transmission – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® C Series Manual &
Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid
Gear Oil: Use only MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual
Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Control system: Use only MOPAR® C Series DDCT
SAE 75W Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance
of your transmission.
Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 4. If DOT 4
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
8
402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
Instrument Panel” for further information.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluswhichever comes first.
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer Severe Duty All Models
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Reis operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditype of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
• Check engine oil level.
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check windshield washer fluid level.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Check and adjust hand brake.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace cabin air filter.
Replace Brake Fluid every two
years
Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
Replace spark plugs. **
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
Change the transmission fluid
(manual, or Euro Twin Clutch) if
using your vehicle for any of the
following: trailer towing, heavy
loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), offroad, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at
sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
Replace the timing belt.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
8
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
9
410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone:
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1-888-242-6342
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT Canada Customer Center
They want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
center.
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
ter should include the following information:
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
9
412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
have any questions about the service contract, call the
concerns.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
WARRANTY INFORMATION
individual problems between you, your authorized
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the dealer, and the manufacturer.
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
market.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
9
414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
You can also obtain other information about motor Service Manuals
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
In Canada
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
ing, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles
should contact the Customer Service Department immedivehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and
maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
• Call toll free at:
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Treadwear
Or
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
9
416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road characThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
teristics and climate.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
Traction Grades
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repreWARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
420 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air Bag
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .352
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
INDEX 421
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .397
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
10
422 INDEX
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .172
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .75
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .74
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .68
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .64
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .187
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
INDEX 423
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.365
.367
.365
.369
.365
.369
.368
.368
.366
.377
.167
.150
.410
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .147
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .123
10
424 INDEX
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .134
Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
INDEX 425
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .398
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Adding . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.302
.300
.397
.299
.169
.169
.299
.169
.169
.300
.299
.299
.397
.302
.384
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
10
426 INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Hazard
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Gasoline, Reformulated . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override
General Information . . . . .
General Maintenance. . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . .
INDEX 427
.328 Lighter, Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
.325 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
.324
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
.332
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .172
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
428 INDEX
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
.353 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
.175
.349 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
.402
.172 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .172
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .167
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX 429
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . .
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . .
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . .
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.299
.175
.175
.180
.180
.350
.397
.351
.350
.352
.352
.352
.352
.351
.351
.352
.348
.136
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .274
Power
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
10
430 INDEX
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Seat Belt
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .43
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .43
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .188
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
INDEX 431
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Seats
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .172
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Service Reminder Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
10
432 INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .188
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .44
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .273
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .293
INDEX 433
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.173
.415
.281
.289
.292
.266
.268
.283
.287
.287
.266
.314
.305
.340
.306
.306
.251
.260
.305
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Euro Twin Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .136
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.187
.209
.415
.187
.136
10
434 INDEX
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .15 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Wait to Start Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .167 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Wrench (Service Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
15BF-126-AB
15BEV24-126-AA
Second
Edition
First Edition
Printed
Printedin
inU.S.A.
U.S.A.